|
Monday July 6, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 7, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 8, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 9, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 10, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday July 11, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 13, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 14, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 15, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 16, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 17, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday July 18, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 20, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 21, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 22, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 23, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 24, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday July 25, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 27, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 28, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 29, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 30, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 31, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday August 1, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday August 3, 2026
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday August 4, 2026
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|